Samsung | YP-U4QB | Samsung YP-U4QB دليل المستخدم

‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪MP3‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺗﺸﻜﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮ ‚ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪www.samsung.com/global/register‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﻮﺷﻤﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻡ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎی ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻃﺮﺡ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﻀﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻴﺐ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﻣﺪﺭﻥ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﻏﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﮔﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻧﺪﮔﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ!‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﭘﺴﻨﺪ!‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 16‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﻳﮏ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﮑﭙﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ USB‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺗﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﺑﺎ ‪ USB 2.0‬ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ‪ USB 1.1‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﮕﻔﺘﯽ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ‪) DNSe‬ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍی‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ( ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﻏﻨﯽ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻴﻖ ﺗﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺎﻭﺭﻧﮑﺮﺩﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﮐﻴﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺯﻳﺒﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻴﮏ ﻭ ﺯﻳﺒﺎﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﺯﺍﺩی ﻋﻤﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪!MP3‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ MP3‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ‪ MP3، WMA‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ Ogg‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ!‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻴﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻣﺮگ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺟﺪی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﺎﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺎﺩی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﯽ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﺗﺬﮐﺮﺍﺕ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺟﻌﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﯽ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺲ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻭﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﭘﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﺍﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺁﻳﻨﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺍی ﺑﻪ ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭﻫﺎی ﺟﺪی ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺬﻭﻝ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﻨﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﺲ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﺏ ﻧﻴﻨﺪﺍﺯﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻴﺲ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻋﻮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮی ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﺪﺭ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺭﻋﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‚ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﺭﺍﻧﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﺩﻭﭼﺮﺧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺒﻴﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭﺳﻴﮑﻠﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻑ ﺟﺪی ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺧﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻂ ﮐﺸﯽ ﻋﺎﺑﺮ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﺎﺕ ﺟﺪی ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻤﻨﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻤﻴﻨﺎﻥ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﻭی ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻭﺍﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﻓﻴﺶ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺗﻴﺰ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺟﺮﺍﺣﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﻃﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﻳﺎ ﭘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭﺩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی ﻳﺎ ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺟﺪی ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 85‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮ ﻗﺪﺭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺟﺪی ﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ )ﻳﮏ ﻣﮑﺎﻟﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺷﺪﺕ ﺻﺪﺍی ‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 60‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﺮﻭﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺩﻩ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ‪ 80‬ﺩﺳﯽ ﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻗﻮﻳﺎً ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻻ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ً‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺵ)ﻫﺎی( ﺧﻮﺩ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺯﻧﮓ ﺍﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻫﺪﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ )‪ ،(35°C )(95°F‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﻮﻧﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺧﻮﺩﺭﻭی ﭘﺎﺭک ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺳﻨﮕﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﻳﺎ ﮔﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺧﺎک ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﺪﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺍﺷﻴﺎی ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺣﺘﻤﺎً ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻬﻢ ﮐﭙﯽ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﺷﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺏ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺑﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻴﻨﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺗﺶ ﺳﻮﺯی‪ ،‬ﺷﻮک ﺍﻟﮑﺘﺮﻳﮑﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺮﺍﺏ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﻤﺎﻧﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺧﺴﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﭼﺎپ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﯽ ﭼﺎپ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ”‪ “Fit to Page‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﭼﺎپ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١٣‬‬
‫‪١۴‬‬
‫‪١۵‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫‪١۶‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٨‬‬
‫‪١٩‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٠‬‬
‫‪٢٣‬‬
‫‪٢۶‬‬
‫‪٢٧‬‬
‫‪٢٨‬‬
‫‪٣٠‬‬
‫‪٣١‬‬
‫‪٣٣‬‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ”ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ“‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ”ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ“‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی‪FM‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ )ﺭﻳﺴﺖ( ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪SAMSUNG MEDIA‬‬
‫‪STUDIO‬‬
‫‪٣٤‬‬
‫‪٣٥‬‬
‫‪٣٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪Samsung Meida Studio‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Samsung‬‬
‫‪Meida Studi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ )‪(Removable Disk‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪٣۴‬‬
‫‪٣٩‬‬
‫‪٤٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪۴١‬‬
‫‪٤١‬‬
‫‪٤٢‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٣‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪۴٧‬‬
‫‪٤٨‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٤٩‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫‪٥٠‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٧‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪٥٨‬‬
‫‪٥٩‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪٦٣‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎ ﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮ ﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﮦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﮦ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪۵۴‬‬
‫‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫‪۶٨‬‬
‫‪٦٨‬‬
‫‪٦٩‬‬
‫‪٧٠‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﻫﺮﻳﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮی ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ CD‬ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺍﺯﻡ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺳﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٩‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ”‪ “L‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺵ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ”‪ “R‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﮔﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ FM‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﻧﮕﻬﺎﺷﺘﻦ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪/‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ ،DNSe‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﻳﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ /‬ﻣﮑﺚ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﮑﺚ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ‪LED‬‬
‫‪ _ ١٠‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ‪ ،‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ”ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ“ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍک‪ /‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺮﺍک ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻝ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﮐﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ /‬ﻣﮑﺚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ /‬ﻣﮑﺚ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺍک‪ /‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﻌﺪی ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﮐﻬﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﻮی ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﻣﯽ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪١١‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺑﻨﺪ ﮔﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺨﻮﺑﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‚ ﺭﻭﺯﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺏ ﺷﻲ ﺑﺎﺭﻳﻚ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ‚ ﺁﻥ ﺳﺒﺰ ﻧﮓ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ _ ١٢‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ،DNSe‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪ /‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﺮ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﻞ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻩ‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﮑﺚ‪ ،‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ )ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪/‬ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻮک ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ‬
‫ƒ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ‬
‫ƒ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺷﻴﯽ ﺑﺠﺰ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺘﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺶ ﭘﻮﺷﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﻧﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﺧﻦ ﺍﻧﮕﺸﺖ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻳﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ١۴‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ mp3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 4‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﯽ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﺎﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ƒ ‪USB connected‬‬
‫)‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ(‬
‫ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺷﺎﺭژ‪...‬‬‫ƒ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬‫ƒ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪) USB‬‬
‫( ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪١۵‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﺋﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﻋﺎﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺪﺕ‬
‫ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎی ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ‪ -35‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪ 95 -‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی )ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 12‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺞ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ‬
‫ﻼ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻟﭗ ﺗﺎپ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﻐﺬﻳﻪ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻴﺰ ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ]‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ‪ ،‬ﻫﻴﭽﻴﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ mp3‬ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی >‪) <Auto Power Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ(‪ 1 ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ١۶‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Samsung Media Studio‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ mp3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣۶‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ‪ Media Studio‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ >‪) <Music‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ( ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Now Playing‬‬
‫‪Artists‬‬
‫‪Albums‬‬
‫‪Songs‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺣﻮﺯﻩ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪١٧‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪) Hold‬ﻗﻔﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻼ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﭼﺎﺭ ﻭﻗﻔﻪ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ -‬ﻣﺜ ً‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯﻭﺁﺯﺍﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ”ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ“‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﮦ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ”‪ ،“File Browser‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ۔‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫‪File Browser‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <File Browser‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ >‪ <File Browser‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ”ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪،‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی“ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ١٨‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Playlists‬‬
‫‪Datacasts‬‬
‫‪Recorded Files‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ”ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ“‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <File Browser‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ¬ی >‪) <File Browser‬ﻣﺮﻭﺭﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ﺣﺎﻭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Playlists‬‬
‫‪Datacasts‬‬
‫‪Recorded Files‬‬
‫‪Music Space.mp3‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun.mp3‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Delete File‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Add to Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete from Playl...‬‬
‫‪Delete File‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﺯﻳﺎﺑﯽ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪١٩‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ mp3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺗﯽ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﺎی ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Settings‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪FM Radio‬‬
‫‪User Button Mode‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ >‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ>‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪Sound Effect‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ /‬ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ >‪ <Settings‬ﺑﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ DNSe‬؟‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )‪ (DNSe‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ MP٣‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٢٠‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪ :Sound Effect‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻭ ‪ EQ‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <Street Mode‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﻴﺎﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ <Off> .‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <On‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <Clarity‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺗﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ >‪ <٢-٠‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <Master EQ‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :DNSe‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ژﺍﻧﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎی >‪،<Studio>، <Normal‬‬
‫>‪,<Concert Hall>, <Dance>, <R&B>, <Club>, <Ballad>, <Jazz>, <Classical>, <Rock‬‬
‫ﻭ >‪ .<User‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ >‪ <User‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ >‪ <EQ‬ﻭ >‪<3D & BASS‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ‪ DNSe‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Play Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی‬
‫>‪ <Repeat One>، <Repeat>، <Normal‬ﻭ >‪ <Shuffle‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Play Speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﺎﺯﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ‪ /‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻫﺮﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎی >‪) >، <x0.9>، <x0.8>، <x0.7‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ( ‪ <x1.2>، <x1.1>، <x1.0‬ﻳﺎ >‪<x1.3‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪).‬ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ :Skip Interval‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﺍک ﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺸﻮﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ> ﻧﻮﻉ >‪ <30sec>, <10sec>, <5sec>, <1 Song‬ﻭ >‪.<1min‬‬
‫‪ :Tag‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﺍک ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺣﺎﻭی ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪ ID3‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <Off‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <On‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺮﺥ ﺑﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ )‪ (VBR‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Ogg‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭘﺮﺵ‬
‫)ﺍﺳﮑﻴﭗ( ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ ID3 Tag‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ ID3 Tag‬ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﮏ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٢١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ)‪) (DNSe‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫>‪<EQ‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺢ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ DNSe‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<User‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <EQ‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪3D & BASS‬‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ >‪ <EQ‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺴﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ‬
‫]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ>‪ <+10~-10‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﻳﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<3D & BASS‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ‪ 3D‬ﻣﺤﻴﻄﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﻤﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ‪ DNSe‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<User‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<3D & BASS‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪EQ‬‬
‫‪3D & BASS‬‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻔﺢﻩ >‪ <3D & BASS‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <3D‬ﻭ >‪ <Bass‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﻄﺢ >‪ <3D‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 4‬ﻭ >‪ <Bass‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ‪ 0‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 4‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫‪ _ ٢٢‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی‪FM‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪FM Radio‬‬
‫‪User Button Mode‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ >‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪FM <FM Radio‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ <FM Radio> FM‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ]‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٢٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی‪FM‬‬
‫‪ :Mode‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ>‪<Manual‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫>‪ <Preset‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Auto Preset‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮑﯽ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﻭ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 25‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :FM Region‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺮﺕ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی >‪ <Japan>، <Korea/US‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <Other Countries‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :FM Sensitivity‬ﻟﺠﻬﺖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻳﺎ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ >‪ <FM Sensitivity‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی >‪ <Middle>، <Low‬ﻭ >‪ <High‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ >‪) <High‬ﺑﺎﻻ( ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ _ ٢۴‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ >‪ <FM Region‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻼ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫ƒ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ‪ FM‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ ﻣﻘﺼﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﻪ‬
‫ ‪ :Korea/US‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎﻣﻬﺎی ‪ 100‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 87.5‬ﺗﺎ‬‫‪ 108.0‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ :Japan‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎﻣﻬﺎی ‪ 100‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 76.0‬ﺗﺎ‬‫‪ 108.0‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ :Other Countries‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ FM‬ﺑﺎ ﮔﺎﻣﻬﺎی ‪ 50‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪87.50‬‬‫ﺗﺎ ‪ 108.00‬ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 30‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭی ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮑﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‪ -‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‚ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫>‪ <Auto Preset‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Mode‬‬
‫‪Auto Preset‬‬
‫‪FM Region‬‬
‫‪FM Sensitivity‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺗﺎ ‪ ٣٠‬ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻱ ‪ FM‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻫﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٢۵‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺑﻴﭗ ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪FM Radio‬‬
‫‪User Button Mode‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ >‪<Sound‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Beep Sound‬‬
‫‪Volume Limit‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Sound‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ :Beep Sound‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﭗ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﻲ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ >‪<Off‬‬
‫ﻭ>‪ <On‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Volume Limit‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ>‪ <On‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎ ‪ 15‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺪ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ >‪ <Off‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ 30‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ >‪ <Off‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ‚ ﻭﻟﻮﻡ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ‪15‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٢۶‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻓﮑﺖ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ‪ LED‬ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Date/Time Set‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Display‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Display‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display Off‬‬
‫‪Screen Saver‬‬
‫‪LED Effect‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ‬
‫‪ :Display Off‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻯ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﻜﻤﻪ ﺍﻯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺫﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻰ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻯ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﻯ ﻫﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ>‪,<3 min>,<1 min>,<30 sec>,<15 sec‬‬
‫>‪ <5 min‬ﻭ >‪ .<Always On‬ﻳﻚ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺁ ﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Screen Saver‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ>‪ <Random‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺳﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺑﺮﺍی ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ >‪،<15sec‬‬
‫>‪ < 5 min> ، <3 min> ، <1 min>، <30sec‬ﻭ>‪ <Off‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺍی ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :LED Effect‬ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﻧﻮﺭ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ‪ LED‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی >‪) <Button>، <Off‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ(‪ <Random> ،‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <Always on‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٢٧‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Date/Time Set‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Language‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Language‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٢٨‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫‪Menu‬‬
‫‪ID3 Tag‬‬
(‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی‬.‫ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‬: :Menu
,<
> ,<Italiano>, <Deutsch>, <Français>, <
>, <English>
,<Magyar>, <Русский>, <Español>, <中文(繁體)>, <中文(简体)>
,<Čeština>, <ไทย>, <Svenska>, <Português>, <Polski>, <Nederlands>
,<Español (Sudamérica)>, <Suomi>, <Dansk>, <Norsk>, <Türkçe>, <Ελληνικά>
,<Română>, <Bulgarian>, <Tiếng Việt>, <Indonesia> ,<Português (Brasil)>
.<Slovenský> ‫< ﻭ‬Slovenščina>, <Українська>
‫ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی‬.‫ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‬:ID3 Tag
,<Japanese>, <Italian>, <German>, <French>, <Korean>, <English>
,<Hungarian>, <Russian>, <Spanish>, < Chinese(T) >, < Chinese(S)>
,<Finnish>, <Thai>, <Swedish>, <Portuguese>, <Polish>, <Dutch>
,<Czech>, <Catalan>, <Basque>, <Afrikaans>, <Norwegian>, <Danish>
,<Rumanian>, <Icelandic>, <Hrvatski>, <Greek> ,<Estonian>
.<Vietnamese> ‫< ﻭ‬Turkish>,<Slovene>, <Slovak>
.‫ƒ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬ID3 Tag ƒ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
،‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬،‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬MP3 ‫ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬ID3 Tag
.‫ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬،‫ ﺳﺎﻝ‬،‫ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‬،‫ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ‬
٢٩ _ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Settings‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ >‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Date/Time Set‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Date/Time Set‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Date‬‬
‫‪Time‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ >‪ <Date/Time Set‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ /‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ :Date‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Time‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻇﻬﺮ‪ /‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻇﻬﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٣٠‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‚ ﻣﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‚ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﻕ‚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Settings‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<System‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ>‪ <System‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Display‬‬
‫‪Language‬‬
‫‪Date/Time Set‬‬
‫‪System‬‬
‫‪Sleep‬‬
‫‪Auto Power Off‬‬
‫‪Library Update‬‬
‫‪Default Set‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٣١‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﺤﺎﺕ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫‪ :Sleep‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی >‪،<Off‬‬
‫>‪ <90min>، <60 min>، <30 min>، <15min‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <120min‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Auto Power Off‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﮑﺚ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی >‪<1 min >، <30 sec>، <15 sec‬‬
‫> ‪ <5 min>، <3 min‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <Always On‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ :Library Update‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﻭﺷﺎﺧﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ ،‬ﺍﮐﺮ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻠﯽ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Default Set‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺯﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <Yes‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <Yes‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <No‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : Format‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <Yes‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <Yes‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎک ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ >‪ <No‬ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :About‬ﻭﺭﺷﻦ ﺷﺒﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ <Firmware Version‬ﻭﺭﺷﻦ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺗﻮﺭی ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪<Used‬ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ‪ <Avaliable> ،‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻗﻴﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ > ‪<Total‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ 1‬ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ = ‪ 1,000,000,000‬ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ‪ :‬ﻇﺮﻓﻴﺖ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﻧﺮﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٣٢‬ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ )ﺭﻳﺴﺖ( ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻴﮑﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﺒﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﺯﻧﺸﺎﻧﯽ )ﺭﻳﺴﺖ( ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ‪ Reset‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﮦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮦ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺷﯽ ﻧﻮک ﺗﻴﺰ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺳﻨﺠﺎﻕ ﻗﻔﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ۔‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ )ﺭﻳﺴﺖ( ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ _ ‪٣٣‬‬
‫‪samsung media studio‬‬
‫‪ Samsung Media Studio‬ﻳﮏ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩی ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻼ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺒ ً‬
‫‪ Media Studio‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی ﻭ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﮐﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ‪ Media Studio‬ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺪ‪:‬‬
‫• ‪ Pentium 500MHz‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ‪USB 2.0‬‬
‫• ‪Windows 2000/XP/Vista‬‬
‫• ‪ DirectX 9.0‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪ 100‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻓﻀﺎی ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺎﺭﺩ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ‬
‫• )ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ ‪ CD ROM (2X‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪ Windows Media Player 9.0‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ﺩﻗﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 1024 x 768‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪ Internet Explorer 6.0‬ﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪ 512‬ﻣﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺭﻡ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ٣۴‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA STUDIO‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺳﺮﭘﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ <Media Studio> ،‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﺍک ﺳﺮﭘﺮﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ CD .١‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮ‬
‫‪ CD-ROM‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Install now‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻧﺼﺐ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎﭘﮑﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ‪ CD-ROM‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻭ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ‪ CD‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ CD‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣۵ _ samsung media studio‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA STUDIO‬‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﭘﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺳﺎﺧﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ<ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ> ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩﺗﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺁﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﮔﺎﻩ ‪) USB‬‬
‫( ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ >‪ USB) USB Connected‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ(< ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ <Media Studio> ،‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ‬
‫‪ Media Studio‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪USB‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪USB‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽ ﻟﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ٣۶‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ]‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ‚ ﺑﻠﻐﺰﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‚ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA‬‬
‫‪) STUDIO‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺭﻭی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Add file‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Media Studio‬‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <Open‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی‬
‫>‪ <Open‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺭﻭی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٣٧ _ samsung media studio‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪SAMSUNG MEDIA‬‬
‫‪) STUDIO‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺟﺘﻨﺎﺏ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﭘﺎﻳﺪﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻫﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺧﻮﺩﺩﺍﺭی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﺭژ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺖ ‪ 32‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺎ)‪ (Vista‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺯﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ Samsung Media Studio‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎی ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫‪ Media Studio‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Help> ← <Help> ← <MENU‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﺗﺸﺨﻴﺺ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻭ ®‪Gracenote CDDB‬‬
‫‪ Music Recognition ServiceSM‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ CDDB‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻮﮔﻮ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭی ‪،Gracenote‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﮔﻮ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭی ‪ Gracenote CDDB‬ﻭ ﻟﻮﮔﻮی »‪،«Powered by Gracenote CDDB‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ Music Recognition Service .‬ﻭ ‪ MRS‬ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ‪ Gracenote‬ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ٣٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ )‪(REMOVABLE DISK‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﮏ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ـ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ <U4> ← < My Computer> .٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫>‪ <U4‬ﮐﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ Windows Explorer‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪) DRM‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺴﮏ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ DRM‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ »ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ« )‪ (DRM‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭی ﻭ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﻓﻊ ﻭ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺣﻖ ﻧﺸﺮ )ﮐﭙﯽ ﺭﺍﻳﺖ( ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ DRM‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ‬
‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژی ﺣﻔﺎﻇﺖ ﻏﻴﺮﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ ﮐﭙﯽ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣٩ _ samsung media studio‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮی ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻁ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎی ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻳﮑﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﮑﺘﺎپ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی >‪Safely Remove USB Mass‬‬
‫‪ <Storage Device Drive‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١1‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢2‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﻪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺭﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻼﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪samsung media studio _ ۴٠‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫‪٣ Now Playing‬‬
‫‪Artists‬‬
‫‪Albums‬‬
‫‪Songs‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۴١‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪی )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺁﺭﺗﻴﺴﺖ‚ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‚ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺳﺒﻚ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺎگ ‪ ID٣‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ‪) Tag ID٣‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ( ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ]‪) [Unknown‬ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Now Playing‬ﺣﺎﻻ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Artists‬ﺁﺭﺗﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎ(‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﺭﺗﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Albums‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ(‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Songs‬ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻫﺎ(‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺩﻱ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﻳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Genres‬ﺳﺒﻚ ﻫﺎ(‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Playlists‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ(‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Recently Added‬ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ(‪ :‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻃﺒﻖ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺭﺩﻳﻒ ﺑﻨﺪی ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ‪ ،‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Recorded Files‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ(‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Music Browser‬ﺑﺮﺍﻭﺯﺭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‪ :‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ‪ MP3، WMA‬ﻭ ‪ Ogg‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ MP1‬ﻳﺎ ‪ MP2‬ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ MP3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ ID3 Tag‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ ID3 Tag‬ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ MP3‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﺮﻣﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﮏ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺑﺮﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۴٢‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺮﺍﮐﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﻣﻴﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺟﺎﺭی‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍک ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺟﺎﺭی ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ[ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍک ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ[ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺬﺷﺘﻦ ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍک ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﺮﺍﻙ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﺖ)‪ ،(VBR‬ﺗﺮﺍک ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ[‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۴٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎ >‪ ‚ <Media Studio‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ‚ ﻳﺎ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ـ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪ Media Studio.‬ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺭﻭی ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪YP-U٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫]‪Music < [YP-U٤‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪OK‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Playlists‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ >‪ <Media studio‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <Playlists‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <New Playlists‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ < Create Playlists‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺭﻭی >‪ <OK‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ >‪ <Playlists‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۴۴‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <My PC‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <My PC‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Playlists‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <Playlists‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻳﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <My PC‬ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۴۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Playlists‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ >‪ <Playlists‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺭﻭی >‪ <Playlists‬ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺁﻟﺒﻮﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ >‪ <Playlists > ← <Music‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 400‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ _ ۴۶‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻼ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﻭﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‚ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ”ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ“ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫‪Add to Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete from Playl...‬‬
‫‪Delete File‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Playlist 1‬‬
‫‪Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Playlist 3‬‬
‫‪Playlist 4‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<File Browser‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ )ﻫﺎی( ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺴﺒﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Add to Playlist‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫[‬
‫ƒ >‪ <Playlists 1‬ﺑﻪ >‪ <Playlists 5‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ >‪<Playlists 1> ← <Playlists> ← <Music‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ > ‪ <Playlists 5‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 400‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ )ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ>‪ <Playlist 1‬ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫>‪ (<Playlist 5‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۴٧‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Genres‬‬
‫‪Playlists‬‬
‫‪Recently Added‬‬
‫‪Recorded Files‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Playlists‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ)ﻫﺎﻱ( ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Playlist 1‬‬
‫‪Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Playlist 3‬‬
‫‪Playlist 4‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺿﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﭘﺨﺸﯽ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺎﻡ >‪) <No file‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ( ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ۴۴‬ﻭ ‪ ۴۶‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﺍﻱ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ _ ۴٨‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫‪Playlist 1‬‬
‫‪Playlist 2‬‬
‫‪Playlist 3‬‬
‫‪Playlist 4‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Music‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ >‪ <Music‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Playlists‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ)ﻫﺎﻱ( ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Add to Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete from Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete All from P...‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺿﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Delete from Playlist‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻞ ‪ ٤-١‬ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Add to Playlist‬‬
‫‪Delete from Playl...‬‬
‫‪Delete All from Play‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Delete All from Playlist‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٧‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۴٩‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Settings‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪FM Radio‬‬
‫‪User Button Mode‬‬
‫‪Sound‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ >‪ <Settings‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻻﻳﯽ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<User Button Mode‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻨﻮی ﻣﺪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ>‪ <User Button Mode‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪Repeat A-B‬‬
‫‪DNSe‬‬
‫‪Play Speed‬‬
‫‪Play Mode‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻻﻳﯽ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫>‪ : <Repeat A-B‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <DNSe‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <Play Speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫>‪ : <Play Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭی ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ )ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ( ﻣﺪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ‪ <Repeat A-B> A-B‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ _ ۵٠‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺸﻬﺎی ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭی ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﮔﻴﺮی ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭی >‪ <Repeat A-B‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ƒ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﻌﻴﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ > < ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻴﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ > < ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻟﻐﻮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺁﻫﻨﮓ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ 3‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﺭﻭﻉ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۵١‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪DNSe‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻫﺮ ﺳﺒﮏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﺪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی >‪ <DNSe‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ DNSe‬ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ DNSe‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ( ←‬
‫)ﺭﺍک( ←‬
‫)ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ( ←‬
‫) ﮐﻼﺳﻴﮏ( ←‬
‫)ﺑﺎﻻﺩ( ←‬
‫)ﺟﺎﺯ( ←‬
‫) ﮐﻠﻮﺏ( ←‬
‫)ﺭﻗﺺ( ←‬
‫)ﺁﺭﺍﻧﺪﺑﯽ( ←‬
‫)ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ(‬
‫)ﺳﺎﻟﻦ ﮐﻨﺴﺮﺕ( ←‬
‫ƒ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ‪ DNSe‬؟‬
‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺻﺪﺍی ﻃﺒﻴﻌﯽ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ )‪ (DNSe‬ﻳﮏ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪ MP٣‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺳﺒﻚ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﺪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی >‪ <Play Speed‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‬
‫>‪) >، <x1.1>، <x1.2>،<x1.3>، <x0.7>، <x0.8>، <x0.9‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ( ‪.<NOR‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮﭼﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ _ ۵٢‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺳﻔﺎﺭﺷﯽ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﺪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی >‪ <Play Mode‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rising Sun‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‬
‫)‪.(Shuffle‬‬
‫)‪(Repeat One‬‬
‫)‪(Repeat‬‬
‫)‪(Normal‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻣﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ƒ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﮏ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ‬
‫‪ :‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻓﻌﻠﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﯽ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۵٣‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ mp3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻟﺬﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی‬
‫‪ FM‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻒ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ -‬ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫‪FM Radio‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <FM Radio‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎ ﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮ ﺩ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺻﺪ ﺍ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺻﺪ ﺍ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻣﻰ ﺷﻮ ﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻳﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺷﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﺗﻮﺙ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻱ ‪ FM‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻫﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۵۴‬ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪) FM‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ‪FM‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻫﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ >‪ <Searching‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍی ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Searching‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ‚‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﻭﻗﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺴﻬﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۵۵‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪) FM‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﮦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﮦ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎی ‪ FM‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﮦ ﺷﺪﮦ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ۔‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ >‪ <PRESET‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ۔‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﯽ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ‪ FM‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ >‪ <MANUAL‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 30‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪ MP3‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ..‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‪ -‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪.١‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻗﺒﻼ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﻮﻳﺶ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢۵‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۵۶‬ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪) FM‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺳﮑﺮﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮﻳﯽ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫?‪Delete‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻪ >‪ <No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ﭘﻴﺶ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ١‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۵٧‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪) FM‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ƒ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﮑﺚ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Playback recorded‬‬
‫?‪file‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﻳﺎ >‪<No‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <No‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ >‪<Recorded File> ← <File Browser‬‬
‫← >‪ <FM Radio‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 999‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ 31‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ) .‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ 128‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪2 ،‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪FM_YMMDD_XXX.mp3”.‬‬
‫‪. “FM‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ”‪ “FM‬ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ “YYMMDD” .‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ”‪ “XXX‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۵٨‬ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ>‪ <Media Studio‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﻭی‬
‫‪ RSS‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻮگ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ‪ RSS‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ RSS‬ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻏﻨﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩﻳﻪ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ xml‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺏ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺑﻠﻮگ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺣﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪﻫﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻬﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ ‚ ﺑﻠﻮگ ﻭ ‪UCC‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣۵‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺒﺖ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺏ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ‪ RSS-‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ>‪ <Subscribe‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫>‪<Media Studio> <Datacasts‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ >‪ <URL‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫>► ‪ <Next‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﺏ ﺭﺍ ﻛﭙﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫>‪ <Subscribe‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ‚ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻛﭙﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺩﺭ >‪ <URL‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﺏ ‪ RSS‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ‚ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ <OK> .٣‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )ﺩﻳﺘﺎﻛﺴﺖ( ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ >‪ <Datacasts> <Media Studiuo‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۵٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ >‪ <New Group‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio> <Datacasts‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻔﺎﺕ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﺗﺎﻳﭗ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫>‪<OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ >‪<Media Studio‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٣۵‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ <Media Studio> .١‬ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‚ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ >‪ <Datacasts‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ‬
‫>‪ <Media Studio‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﮔﺮﻭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۶٠‬ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ >‪) <Media Studio‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪ .٥‬ﭘﺴﺘﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۶‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫‪[YP-U4] > Music‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﺴﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫>‪.<Datacasts> ← <File Browser‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ >‪ <Datacast‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻮﺩﻳﻮ>‪ <Media Studio‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺴﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ) ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ( ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﻭﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺳﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﻭﻧﻠﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۶١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ>‪ <Datacast‬ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﭘﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫>‪ .<Media Studio‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۵٩~۶١‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Datacasts‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Datacasts‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ >‪ <Datacasts‬ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻳﺘﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ >‪<No File‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺿﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪My Channel 1‬‬
‫‪My Channel 2‬‬
‫‪My Channel 3‬‬
‫‪My Channel 4‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺴﺘﯽ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻫﻀﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ]‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۶٢‬ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺨﻨﺎﻥ ‪ ،‬ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﯽ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻫﺎی ﺧﺎﺭﺟﯽ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ‪ mp3‬ﺧﻮﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻳﮏ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮی ‪ FM‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ FM‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺵ ‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪<Voice REC‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫‪Voice REC‬‬
‫[ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺾ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﮑﺚ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ _ ‪۶٣‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ )ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫[ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ]‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﭘﻴﺎﻣﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Playback recorded‬‬
‫?‪file‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺑﺮﺭﻭی ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ]ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ[ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﻳﺎ >‪ <No‬ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ] [ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <Yes‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ >‪ <No‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻣﻴﮑﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻫﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻁ ƒ ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ‬
‫ƒ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ >‪<Recorded File> ← <File Browser‬‬
‫← >‪ <Voice‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ƒ ﻫﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﺪﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﺎ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ﺗﺎ ‪ 999‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ƒ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎ ‪ 42‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ) .‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ 96‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪2 ،‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﮕﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ƒ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮑﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ”_‪VCE”_YYMMDD‬‬
‫‪ “XXX.mp3”. “VCE‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺻﺪﺍﺳﺖ‪ “YYMMDD“.‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭ ”‪ “XXX‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ _ ۶۴‬ﻓﺮﺍﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ MP3‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﻭﺑﺮﻭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺣﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﮕﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺭﻓﻊ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﮏ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮی ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ‪ Reset‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﻓﻠﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﯽ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮐﻠﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﻭ ﺁﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ‪ Reset‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻧﻤﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ >‪ <Display Off‬ﺍﺯ‬
‫>‪ <Display> ← <Settings‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻟﻤﺴﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮔﻤﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺭﻭﻱ ﺁﻥ ﺿﺮﺑﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺧﻮﺭﺷﻴﺪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻭﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ _ ‪۶۵‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﻼ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﮐﺎﻣ ً‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ>‪ <Auto Power Off‬ﺍﺯ>‪<System> ← <Settings‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪ ﻣﻜﺚ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﺁﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﮐﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎی ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﮕﻴﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮء ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ‪Media‬‬
‫‪Studio‬‬
‫• ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ۶۶‬ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻼﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• >‪ <Start‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪ Windows Update‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ‪Key Updates and .‬‬
‫‪ Service Packs‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭی ﻫﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯی ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍً ﺑﺮﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺳﺎﺯﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﯽ ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻧﻴﺮﻭی ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﮑﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫ﺁﭘﻠﻮﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻴﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﺋﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﮦ ﺍﺳﺖ۔‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﭘﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ‪ Reset‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﻧﺪ‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﻴﺶ ‪ USB‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ‪/‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺟﺪی ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﯽ ﺩﻗﺖ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺯﻳﺮﺍ ﺷﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩی ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺮﺭﺳﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪) VBR‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺑﻴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻐﻴﺮ( ﺍﺳﺖ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻪ ﺑﺨﺶ >‪<ID3 Tag> ← <Language> ← <Settings‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﻨﻮی ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺭژ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺴﺌﻠﻪ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮی ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻤﺮ ﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﺭﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﮦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﮦ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺂﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ‪ XP‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Vista‬ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ >‪ <Media Studio‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺁﻫﺴﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎی ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭی ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻏﻴﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩی ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ _ ‪۶٧‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺖ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬MP3 ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺠﺎ ﻧﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﯽ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
.‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
Music
FM Radio
Datacasts
Voice REC
File Browser
Settings
Music
FM Radio
User Button
Mode
Sound
Display
Language
Date/Time
Set
System
Sound
Effect
Mode
Repeat A-B
Beep
Sound
Display Off
Menu
Date
Sleep
DNSe
Auto Preset
DNSe
Volume
Limit
Screen
Saver
ID3 Tag
Time
Auto Power
Off
Play Mode
FM Region Play Speed
Play Speed
FM
Sensitivity
Play Mode
LED Effect
Library
Update
Default set
Skip
Interval
Format
Tag
About
‫ _ ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬۶٨
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺗﺮی ﺩﺍﺧﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭﻫﺎ‪ /‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ ﮔﻮﺷﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﯽ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﻤﻖ × ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﻋﺮﺽ(‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ‪FM‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ‪ FM‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻧﻮﻳﺰ‬
‫‪YP-U4‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 3.7‬ﻭﻟﺖ‪ 500 /‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ‬
‫‪ 300‬ﻣﻴﻠﯽ ﺁﻣﭙﺮ‪ /‬ﺑﺮﻕ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ‪ 3.7‬ﻭﻟﺖ‬
‫‪ MPEG1/2/2.5‬ﻻﻳﻪ ‪, 8kbps~320kbps) 3‬‬
‫‪,48kHz~192kHz) WMA (8kbps~48kbps‬‬
‫)‪Q1~Q10) Ogg ,(8kHz~48kHz‬‬
‫ﻓﻮﻟﺪﺭ‪ :‬ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‪ /1000 .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ‪3000 .‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻣﻴﻠﻲ ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ /‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ )ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ 16‬ﺍﻫﻢ(‬
‫‪ 40‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺗﺎ ‪ 20‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ‬
‫‪ 90‬ﺩﺳﻲ ﺑﻞ ‪ 20‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ )LPF‬ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪ 1‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ ‪ 0‬ﺩﺳﻲ ﺑﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ 16‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ) ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ‪MP3 128kbps :‬‬
‫ﮐﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻮﻡ‪ ،15 :‬ﻣﺪ ﻧﺮﻣﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‬
‫)‪-5~35°C (23~95°F‬‬
‫ﭘﻼﺳﺘﻴﮑﯽ‬
‫‪ 27.5‬ﮔﺮﻡ‬
‫‪ 13x83x27‬ﻣﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺮ‬
‫‪108.0MHz~87.5‬‬
‫‪FM T.H.D‬‬
‫‪1%‬‬
‫‪55 dB‬‬
‫ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺩی ‪FM‬‬
‫‪38dBμ‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﭽﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ _ ‪۶٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﻌﻨﻮی ﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻦ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍی‬
‫ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﻣﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺨﺼﯽ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺟﻬﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭻ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﺭی ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻧﮕﺮﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﺪﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﺁﻳﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 13818-3‬ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻤﻴﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻭ‪/‬ﻳﺎ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺑﺎ ‪ISO/IEC 11172-3‬‬
‫ﻳﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 13818-3‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻴﭻ ﺣﻘﻮﻗﯽ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﻣﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻴﻬﺎ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 11172-3‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ISO/IEC 13818-3‬ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻴﮕﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ _ ٧٠‬ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﺩﻧﻴﺎ‬SAMSUNG ‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺘﺮی‬،‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﻧﻈﺮی ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬SAMSUNG
Country
CANADA
MEXICO
U.S.A
ARGENTINE
BRAZIL
CHILE
NICARAGUA
HONDURAS
COSTA RICA
ECUADOR
EL SALVADOR
GUATEMALA
JAMAICA
PANAMA
PUERTO RICO
REP. DOMINICA
TRINIDAD & TOBAGO
VENEZUELA
COLOMBIA
BELGIUM
CZECH REPUBLIC
DENMARK
FINLAND
Customer Care Center 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
01-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-333-3733
0800-124-421 , 4004-0000
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
00-1800-5077267
800-7919267
0-800-507-7267
1-800-10-7267
800-6225
1-800-299-0013
1-800-234-7267
800-7267
1-800-682-3180
1-800-751-2676
1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0-800-100-5303
01-8000112112
0032 (0)2 201 24 18
844 000 844
70 70 19 70
030-6227 515
FRANCE
3260 SAMSUNG ( 0,15/Min),
08 25 08 65 65 ( 0,15/Min)
GERMANY
HUNGARY
ITALIA
LUXEMBURG
NETHERLANDS
01805 - SAMSUNG(726-7864) (
06-80-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0035 (0)2 261 03 710
0900-SAMSUNG(726-7864) (
Web Site
www.samsung.com/ca
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ar
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/cl
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com/latin
www.samsung.com.co
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/cz
www.samsung.com/dk
www.samsung.com/fi
www.samsung.com
0,14/Min)
0,10/Min)
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/be
www.samsung.com/nl
Country
NORWAY
POLAND
PORTUGAL
SLOVAKIA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
U.K
EIRE
AUSTRIA
SWITZERLAND
RUSSIA
KAZAHSTAN
UZBEKISTAN
KYRGYZSTAN
TADJIKISTAN
UKRAINE
LITHUANIA
LATVIA
ESTONIA
AUSTRALIA
NEW ZEALAND
CHINA
HONG KONG
INDIA
INDONESIA
MALAYSIA
PHILIPPINES
SINGAPORE
THAILAND
TAIWAN
VIETNAM
TURKEY
SOUTH AFRICA
U.A.E
Customer Care Center 815-56 480
0 801 801 881 , 022-607-93-33
80820-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
902 10 11 30
0771-400 200
0845 SAMSUNG (7267864)
0818 717 100
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
0800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
8-800-555-55-55
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
00-800-500-55-500
8-10-800-500-55-500
8-800-502-0000
8-800-77777
800-7267
800-7267
1300 362 603
0800SAMSUNG(726-7864)
800-810-5858 , 010-6475 1880
3698-4698
3030 8282 , 1800 110011
0800-112-8888
1800-88-9999
1800-10-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1800-SAMSUNG(726-7864)
1800-29-3232 , 02-689-3232
0800-329-999
1 800 588 889
444 77 11
0860-SAMSUNG(726-7864 )
800-SAMSUNG (726-7864), 8000-4726
Web Site
www.samsung.com/no
www.samsung.com/pl
www.samsung.com/pt
www.samsung.com/sk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/se
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/ie
www.samsung.com/at
www.samsung.com/ch
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.kz
www.samsung.uz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.lt
www.samsung.com/lv
www.samsung.ee
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/nz
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/my
www.samsung.com/ph
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com/tw
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
www.samsung.com
‫ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬GPL/LGPL ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﺠﻮﺯ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﺠﻮﺯ ﻭ‬LGPL ‫ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎی‬GPL
‫ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﮐﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺸﺎء ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﻤﻮﻝ‬GPL/LPGL ‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺖ ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
.‫ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﺎﺿﺎ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‬dmav.sec@samsung.com ‫ﻧﻤﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻒ ﺍﻳﻤﻴﻞ‬
GPL EXECUTABLES:
- Linux Kernel, Busybox
LGPL LIBRARIES
- uClibc, SDL
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the
software, or if you modify it.
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA For example, if you distribute copies of such a program,
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all
the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
receive or can get the source code. And you must show
Preamble
them these terms so they know their rights.
The licenses for most software are designed to take away
your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the
GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software--to make sure
the software is free for all its users. This General Public
License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s
software and to any other program whose authors commit
to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software
is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom,
not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to
make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies
of free software (and charge for this service if you wish),
that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that
you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you know you can do these things.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the
software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal
permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to
make certain that everyone understands that there is no
warranty for this free software. If the software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to
know that what they have is not the original, so that any
problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original
authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software
patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of
a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in
effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for
everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
and modification follow.
forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may
be distributed under the terms of this General Public License.
The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work,
and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a
work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim
or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the
Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole
at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands
interactively when run, you must cause it, when started
running for such interactive use in the most ordinary
way, to print or display an announcement including an
appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there
is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a
warranty) and that users may redistribute the program
under these conditions, and telling the user how to
view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program
itself is interactive but does not normally print such an
announcement, your work based on the Program is not
required to print an announcement.)
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are
not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The
act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output
from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute
a work based on the Program (independent of having been These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole.
made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the
Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and
on what the Program does.
separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms,
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as
source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as
you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the
an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire
absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who
Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
wrote it.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
exchange for a fee.
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or
any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program,
and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the
terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on
the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the
Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does
not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based
notices stating that you changed the files and the date on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form
of any change.
under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine- terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
readable source code, which must be distributed under
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have
not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission
customarily used for software interchange; or,
to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works.
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
your cost of physically performing source distribution, a Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate
complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms
source code, to be distributed under the terms of and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the
Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used Program or works based on it.
for software interchange; or,
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives
the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or
alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions.
and only if you received the program in object code You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’
or executable form with such an offer, in accord with exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
Subsection b above.)
for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
The source code for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For an executable
work, complete source code means all the source code
for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation
and installation of the executable. However, as a special
exception, the source code distributed need not include
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation
of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited
to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether
by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the
conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the
conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to
satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence
you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if
a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution
of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or
indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from
access to copy from a designated place, then offering distribution of the Program.
equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place counts as distribution of the source code, even though If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable
third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with under any particular circumstance, the balance of the
section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is
the object code.
intended to apply in other circumstances.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the
Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of
Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting
under this License. However, parties who have received copies, the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses implemented by public license practices. Many people have
made generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide
if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted
in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted
interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the
Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that
distribution is permitted only in or among countries not
thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised
and/or new versions of the General Public License from
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to
the present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
Program specifies a version number of this License which
applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option
of following the terms and conditions either of that version
or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version
number of this License, you may choose any version ever
published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other
free programs whose distribution conditions are different,
write to the author to ask for permission. For software which
is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the
Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for
this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving
the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM,
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE
QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS
WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE,
YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED
ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED
BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE
PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of
the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to
achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can
redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is
safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most
effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file
should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to
where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program’s name and an idea of what
it does.
Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/
or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation;
either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit
linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what
you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License
instead of this License.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without
Version 2.1, February 1999
even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
Copyright
(C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
GNU General Public License for more details.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
You should have received a copy of the GNU General
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Public License along with this program; if not, write to
the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public
License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice
like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Preamble
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author
The licenses for most software are designed to take away
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU
for details type `show w’. This is free software, and you General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your
are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; freedom to share and change free software--to make sure
type `show c’ for details.
the software is free for all its users.
The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should
show the appropriate parts of the General Public License.
Of course, the commands you use may be called something
other than `show w’ and `show c’; they could even be
mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies
to some specially designated software packages--typically
libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors
who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you
first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) General Public License is the better strategy to use in any
or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the particular case, based on the explanations below.
program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest
in the program `Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at
compilers) written by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed
to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of
free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you
receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can
change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs;
and that you are informed that you can do these things.
This General Public License does not permit incorporating To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that
your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to
surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the
or if you modify it.
ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether software developers Less of an advantage over competing
gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we
that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain
with the library, you must provide complete object files to the special circumstances.
recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need
making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so
that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, nonmust show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more
the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you frequent case is that a free library does the same job as
legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that use the Lesser General Public License.
there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is
modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients In other cases, permission to use a particular library in nonshould know that what they have is not the original version, free programs enables a greater number of people to use a
so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by large body of free software. For example, permission to use
the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more
problems that might be introduced by others.
people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less
cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by
protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user
obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore,
of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom
we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the
and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified
library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified
version of the Library.
in this license.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the
modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between
ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU
a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”.
Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated
The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the
libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public
latter must be combined with the library in order to run.
License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to
permit linking those libraries into non-free programs.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or
using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or
speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright
The ordinary General Public License therefore permits holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed
such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also
freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/
or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with
application programs (which use some of those functions
and data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work
which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based
on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative
work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications
and/or translated straightforwardly into another language.
(Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work
for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source
code means all the source code for all modules it contains,
plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts
used to control compilation and installation of the library.
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
•b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent
notices stating that you changed the files and the date
of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed
at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or
a table of data to be supplied by an application program
that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed
when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application
does not supply such function or table, the facility still
operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose
remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are
has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of
not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The
the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any
act of running a program using the Library is not restricted,
application-supplied function or table used by this function
and output from such a program is covered only if its contents
must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the
constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the
square root function must still compute square roots.)
use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true
depends on what the Library does and what the program that These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If
uses the Library does.
identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library,
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s and can be reasonably considered independent and separate
complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate
each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of
warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution
and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose
permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and
this License along with the Library.
thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a
copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or
contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather,
exchange for a fee.
the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any derivative or collective works based on the Library.
portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and
copy and distribute such modifications or work under the In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based
terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the
Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does
of these conditions:
not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU
General Public License instead of this License to a given
copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices
that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary
GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this
License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary
GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can
specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any
other change in these notices.
header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the
work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the
source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant
if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is
itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely
defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data
structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small
inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a
for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus
applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
from that copy.
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code distribute the object code for the work under the terms of
of the Library into a program that is not a library.
Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with
derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also
combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library
to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and
distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that
the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to own use and reverse engineering for debugging such
copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access modifications.
to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work
requirement to distribute the source code, even though third that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use
parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this
object code.
License. If the work during execution displays copyright
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library
the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the
compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that
you accompany it with the complete corresponding machinereadable source code, which must be distributed under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily
used for software interchange.
Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library,
and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library
creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library
(because it contains portions of the Library), rather than
a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore
covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution
of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding
machine-readable source code for the Library including
whatever changes were used in the work (which must
be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if
the work is an executable linked with the Library, with
the complete machine-readable “work that uses the
Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the
user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a
modified executable containing the modified Library. (It
is understood that the user who changes the contents
of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be
able to recompile the application to use the modified
definitions.)
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the
same work based on the Library, uncombined with any
other library facilities. This must be distributed under the
terms of the Sections above.
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the
the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at
fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and
run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s
explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined
computer system, rather than copying library functions
form of the same work.
into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute
modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as the Library except as expressly provided under this License.
long as the modified version is interface-compatible with Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link
the version that the work was made with.
with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at terminate your rights under this License. However, parties
least three years, to give the same user the materials who have received copies, or rights, from you under this
specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more License will not have their licenses terminated so long as
such parties remain in full compliance.
than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to
copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to
copy the above specified materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these
materials or that you have already sent this user a copy.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have
not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to
modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License.
Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work
based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying,
Library” must include any data and utility programs needed distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it.
for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special
exception, the materials to be distributed need not include 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work
anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with
on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally
accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of
means you cannot use both them and the Library together in patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent
issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order,
an executable that you distribute.
agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this
the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously
library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such your obligations under this License and any other pertinent
a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the
work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive
copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you
could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free
programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with
these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software
which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions
under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software
and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
apply in other circumstances.
NO WARRANTY
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any
patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO
the integrity of the free software distribution system which is THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT
implemented by public license practices. Many people have WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
made generous contributions to the wide range of software HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY
distributed through that system in reliance on consistent “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE
system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE
believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
the original copyright holder who places the Library under this LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT
License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/
excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE,
in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
this License.
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO
USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE
OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR
A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY
OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER
PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
SUCH DAMAGES.
Library specifies a version number of this License which applies
to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
not specify a license version number, you may choose any If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the
version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/
or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from
time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to
the present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
it free software that everyone can redistribute and change.
You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms
(or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General
Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the
library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source
file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty;
and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a
pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the library’s name and an idea of what it
does.
Copyright (C) year name of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public
License as published by the Free Software Foundation;
either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser
General Public License along with this library; if not, write
to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street,
Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic
and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a
programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright
disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter
the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in
the library `Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by
James Random Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
REV.0.0
Download PDF

advertising